Home

Dodge SRT4 User's Manual

Contents

1. E Voice Recognition System VR Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 120 Mc E ae ll To Open And Close The Hood 121 ha d M Bus le esa pAEA RE RETO Ha PERS 122 COBUIAHOS re ett ee qan SEN RH i Multifunction Lever llle 122 Voice Training 114 Headlights Parking Lights And Instrument Baa5 ts isses em ede es 114 Panellights 2e eos err e ms 123 Front Seat Adjustment 114 Lights On Reminder 124 Manual Seat Height Adjustment 115 Fog Lights If Equipped 124 Manual Lumbar 23 RS 116 Tum Signals s eix ee E xS 124 Driver s Seatback Recline 116 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 125 Heated Seats If Equipped 117 Flashi To Pass cu te ace Rache 126 Adjustable Head Restraints 118 Map Reading Lights 126 Folding Rear Seat i sa s 119 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped d due tut Edere 127 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 E Windshield Wipers And Washers 127 To Accelerate For Passing 133 Windshield Wiper Operation 127 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped Intermittent Wiper System 128 Programming HomeLink Windsh
2. 00000008 58 Recreational Towing 0000000000 303 Reformulated Gasoline 00 0085 297 Refrigerant sospes dada eer ea Bnei 335 Reminder Seat Belt 00000000008 46 Remote Control Door Locks ia ieadecsycesns RR men 20 Sec rity Alarm sce eroe ew es 19 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 236 Replacement Bulbs 0 000000 00 u 355 Replacement Keys ssc osa isindad e xS 17 Replacement Parts 328 Replacement Tires iaces ve exe riesi 284 Reporting Safety Defects 04 386 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 167 184 Restraints Child 000 61 68 Restraints Infant Lake AR E XO 61 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 4 149 Rotation Tires 20 0 4 00544 4 bee dese eee ds oo 286 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 71 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 72 en INDEX 403 Safety Defects Reporting 386 Safety Information Tire 4 270 Dalely TIPS ten is od b oun Sor eie ales reduce 70 Satellite Radio 14 4 d b d por wee bad os 228 Satellite Radio Antenna l l 230 Schedule Maintenance lesen 364 Seat Belt Maintenance 00 000 eee 351 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 00 ee eee 46 Seat Belts Adjustable Shoulder Belt 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 41 And Pregn
3. 4 0 152 B Electrical Power Outlets 144 Beer Nada VIPER VARAT aie para site me H Cupholders PPM Mm 145 Rer WIBOQWIDSHOH bosse tddssbdde des me E Cooled Beverage Storage Bin Glove Mi Console Features 000 000 ee 146 Compariment I Rouipped secos vacates 154 H Cargo Area Features 00000 sees 147 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror B1f1be98 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver s Side
4. 131 168 Speedom ter sse xe eek bene cues 167 Speedometer and Odometer 163 DtATHN PET 250 Engine Fails to Start csse esa pee ns 251 Starting Procedures 0 0000 c eee 250 Steering POWEP xoa eh wee E ex E RES 257 258 Tilt Column eset Rec eR mRE e 130 Wheel Lock 2 5 4eBe RE X eme ae ook 15 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 2 6 eee ee 236 Storage Lupe Kus deg yale qr Di SUR ORE hip a des 355 Stuck Freeing isses n 319 Suri ROOP sen eio ieri bedhead dt exo EE 140 Sun Visor Extension llle 81 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Tachometet acd Eee aN ale Goh ES 165 Taillights oid eet oc Pia rc RRPRRR REPE S 357 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 164 307 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 19 Theft System Security Alarm 19 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 0 6 0 eae 150 Tilt Steering Column s crause diras ruin Teesi 130 Tire and Loading Information Placard 275 Tire Identification Number TIN 274 Tire Markings leeeeeee 270 Tire Safety Information 00 270 TREFT Luke REP ee RR RR es 308 en INDEX 405 Tires nosse ow orare a x x argo aud 72 279 389 Aging Life of Tires llle 284 Aur Pressure 2 242 3 Ree 34 REX 279 CHhalfiS Lace dete de Det or oor ci Bd 285 General Information llle 279 High Speed ue
5. 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loa
6. en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 the bulb does not come on when turning the key from g the key OL UUN OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most tion or sensor damage may result when using re Situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not m placement equipment that is not of the same size require towing type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of TPMS as damage to the sensors may result power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 24 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 23 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Ind
7. 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL xe Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 5 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 secon
8. Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights whi
9. Power Window Switches Auto Down llle Window Lockout Switch morc t ll Occupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belts 00 0 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 4 Seat Belt Pretensioners 2 000 5 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Enhanced Driver And Seat Belt Reminder W Safety Tips oss Vua dag a Eua de RD Cg 70 System BeltAlert 000 46 Exhaust Gas ERE Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 47 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Vehicle 3o assert e ae eap Ho ace eo PRORA Restraint System SRS Airbag 48 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Child Restraint uo 0h eased ae ao 61 Outside The Vehicle 4 72 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 69 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8163e6a8 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission
10. Red Conn PCM ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 VEHICLE STORAGE CAU AL If you will not be using your vehicle for more than e When installing the Integrated Power Module 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop battery erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it pee indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Light 00 T578 Center Dome Light 0005 T578 Rear Cargo Flashlight 8 A35LF LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Headlight H13 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light E 3157AK or 3157A Front Fog ight sse Sete eer Se me d 9145 C
11. The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Ph
12. 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature is 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature is 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment information or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 282 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires w
13. 352 Interior Appearance Care 0005 349 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 128 Introduction sse er Re dea Dood Qe 4 Jump Starting ses cide esee ra XE Een e 317 Key Programming 2 laeua ei es 18 Key Replacement llle 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Key In Reminder cs kem aeree RR er e 15 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 KeyS osea pais sed d eos nico d segetes 43 12 Kicker Sound System 000000000 233 Lane Change and Turn Signals 357 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0004 36 Latches Hood cis essa a Khao e RR aeu 121 en INDEX 399 Lead Free Gasoline sios sanee 0 0 0 0 0 eee 296 Life Of Tires isses ee eee a eee eee 284 Liftgate Sedan isaste sees eere 34 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 152 Eight Bulbs s secte smsi UE as Sarees wats 355 ASS exceed Cie reed 72 122 ADAD ruo ands d Ore e FERRE nd 58 71 165 AnttLocek eee bee Re 604 da 173 Back UD ierat ede tee Pel ere s 357 Brake Warning eS es be es ce ens 169 Bulb Replacement lt osaset diea miera ma diea 356 Cargo eias ka oboe rus oh Oden Y o rs 147 Center Mounted Stop 04 358 Daytime Running sre diweir a 000 cee eee 127 Dimmer Switch Headlight 122 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator enki cee pnts cee eee Se os 266 269 Engine Temperature Warning 166 Op Juicio uel suec denies we ate 124 171 356 H
14. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components 298 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octan
15. If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 EAE E E EAEE 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions 3 ON 4 START 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission 1 Turn the ignitio
16. N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 370 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A eS s G M 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or i Schedule 54 Months Maintenance N T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule D 1 Rotate tires 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil M 4 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter E engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary E I he brake 1 l f J Replace the air conditioning filter S lm Inspect the CV joints IM a Inspect exhaust system nspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary E ar he f ion tie rod ends and boot seals replace if D J Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 371 60 Months Maintenance Service Sch
17. e Oil Change Required with a single chime e Performance Pages if equipped e Compass Temperature Audio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 e Average fuel economy Performance Pages If Equipped e Distance To Empty DTE WARNING Elapsed ti m i a E Measurement of vehicle statistics with the perfor e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM mance pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public 1 Setti P PE SOON RSIS roadways It is recommended that these features be To Reset The Display used in a controlled environment and within the Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as function currently being displayed Reset will only occur measured by the performance pages must never be if a resettable function is currently being displayed exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Performance Pages display in the EVIC the following performance data NOTE 1 8 mile time and speed 1 4 mile time and speed 0 60 mph 100 kp h time Braking distance speed and distance Vehicle G force longitudinal and lateral If any of the Performance Page screens are active the Trip button will not affect the odometer The trip button will toggle t
18. inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags If equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The side airbag control module will not detect rollover front or rear collisions The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The side curtain airbag moves
19. wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alco
20. your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section T
21. OPERATING 287 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure e The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressur
22. Switch The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open ome condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious again injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being Express Mode thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed Always will open automatically from any position The sunroof fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all will open fully and stop automatically this is called passengers are properly secured too express open During express open operation any Do not allow small children to operate the sun movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
23. The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 n Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power WINDOW switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the B window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time 021906197 Window Lockout Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start your vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn it to the right manual lock models only The liftgate ca
24. VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position Front Seat Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Using body pressure move forward and rearward onthe Manual Seat Height Adjustment seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratchet handle on the outboard side of the seat to WARNING adjust the driving position e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose c
25. Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 20 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 21 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ESP ity Progr
26. activated The heat output then drops to the normal High level If High is selected the system will automatically switch to Low after about 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illu minated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on Low heating also turns off auto matically after about 30 minutes NOTE If High is selected heat will be felt within two to three minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise a head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the button and push down on the head restraint Head Restraints Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear se
27. and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface Fuel Filler Door CAUTION e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 302 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable contai
28. and place them on your hands PS 2 Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to the Sealant Air Mode position 3 Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose 7 and then remove the Yellow Cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 4 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 5 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 7 onto the valve stem 6 Uncoil the Power Plug and Cable 5 and then insert the plug into the vehicle s power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated tire 1 Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit and the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 7 and into the tire NOTE Some sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire 2 After pressing the Air Pump Power Button 3 the air pump should start to inflate the tire 3 If the sealant Does Not Flow Through the Clear Sealant Hose 7 e Press the Air Pump Power Button 3 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 to the valve stem Press the Air Pump Power Button 3 to turn ON the TIREFIT kit Turn the Mode Select knob to the Sealant Air Mode Connect the Power P
29. control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc
30. coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If anti freeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifre
31. dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Fan Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control from the left OFP to the right position 81cab396 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control etnias Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures mm NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce a
32. e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup 3 To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the
33. equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Ex
34. flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters For more information refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming procedure in this section of the manual General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
35. for assistance ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 H Sealant Bottle Replacement 1 Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose 7 2 Locate the rectangular SEALANT BOTTLE RELEASE button in the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch the hoses 6 7 from their storage area 3 Use the Yellow Cap on end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 to depress the SEALANT BOTTLE RELEASE button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 to the housing so that the Clear Sealant Hose 7 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing Then press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked in place 6 Verify the Yellow Cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 and return the hose to its storage area 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage area in the vehicle JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Continued 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an aut
36. headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in this section Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec
37. information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC 388 vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find an
38. it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age sy
39. like parking cards for easy access UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bi Instrument Panel Features 161 Average Fuel Economy I Turbo Boost Gauge lt 4 seeks eren 162 Distance To Empty DTE H Instrument Clusters sa ccce EE oR eens 163 Elapsed Time sad ened inde eae viru 181 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 164 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM E Electronic Vehicle Information Center lt Equipped os eee tia mee en 181 EVIC a oet ep iet se RUE 174 Personal Settings Customer Programmable EVIC Functions isses eee 176 a dudit 2 ESRC IU A ep A UT sion ET CoU pass a ae nel Compass Variance liess 185 Equipped Jic cte er ee 180 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Compass Calibration li Electronic Digital Clock Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jacki neue dk he a LETS Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 5 iae kata athe es Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped 0 Operating I
40. or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance 300 STARTING AND OPERATING EE The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed a gainst you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide
41. paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in th
42. passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 3902 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 261 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 341 Adding Fuel 22x seq RR RETE Re 301 Additives Fuel llle 299 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 332 Air Conditioner Maintenance 335 Air Conditioning Controls 238 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 244 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 335 Air Conditioning System 238 335 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 280 Airbag agde edu d ddnde RTT ud 48 Airbag Deployment llle 56 Airbag Light 0 4 owe te ee m Era 58 71 165 Airbag Maintenance 0 0 0 0 002 ee eee 58 Airbag Side a4 084 ona he eem ex eR 55 Airbag Window Side Curtain 49 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 165 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lesse 230 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 340 359 360 Capacities os sacceriasencrageenntioedes 359 Disposal 3 ia 62244 bee eR Re e des 343 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 261 Anti Lock Warning Light teses 173 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Appearance
43. phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones ove
44. quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts
45. require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride E Oo ZR E 5 055703771 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND
46. rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Usually the least accelerator pedal CAUTION pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast ning the wheels is most effective may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can WARNING also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster With Ignition Key than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with matter what the speed the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground Automatic Transaxle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transaxle e Front Wheel Driv
47. s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button A second press will unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn On Lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected you can choose to have the
48. serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with re quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FM VSS If Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the airbag control modules detect a moderate to severe col lision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor WARNING immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli smoke like particles The particles are a normal by sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized product of the process that generates the non
49. set the Mode control at or near 7J and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near Z2 COOL OR COLD If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and f then turn the air NIE CONDITIONS conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn bg 646 the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between oT S3 Jand S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 4 If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and In very cold weather dll if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 4 045605322 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows set mode to the mix or defrost position Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recircu late position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicl
50. severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten sioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver And Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the s
51. sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in t
52. the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Pr
53. the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Headlights Parking Lights and Instrument Panel To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent down for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation 81c84c33 Dimmer Control 84c84c2e Headlight Control 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch
54. the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position Child Protection Door Lock Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Inserting Ignition Key Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches 021906196 Power Window Switch Location The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature
55. the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 4 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 7 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 8 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
56. this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems D A l lt 4 lt QE IN e ed s P Chrysler etC 5 5565 TS P 812260938 First Edition PAS 22 Uu ref S b r p SOS cef di os Re m Ww po n od D N m
57. to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button w
58. verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II sy
59. works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The radio uses the following limits for file systems Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files e Maximum number of files 255 Discs created with an op
60. 0 0 0 0000005 346 Frequency of Fluid Change 347 Lubricant Selection llle 346 Map Reading Lights 000050 126 Methanol 1 135 ohne ds bee eed 297 MITOS su Sodas Saeed aem RR CR CR ay ea ee ORE E 77 Automatic Dimming s sco secede i eaea 78 Electric Powered llle 79 OUSIDE s Joh seen dd kale Poe dd Ed Red aur dd 78 REATVICW 2s Son es eas an BR aed is 77 Vanity 103048 es kae uci ese HEUER etei s 81 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 287 Mopar Parts 328 386 MTBEZETBE 4 132 ete dGbeEAGG E3YWEe 297 Multi Function Control Lever 122 New Vehicle Break In Period 69 Occupant Restraints Sedan 00 35 en INDEX 401 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 296 Odometer cee rae es eee ty y eae 167 TP 4 022 deett pies bed tens 167 168 Oil Change Indicator 167 184 ChL GAs sesto ade E dE 329 359 Capacity xivadcewa Eee uk ud ad Ceo t 359 Change Interval ck kem acre do emm 330 Checking o24 s a adebiw edad edisee dE an 329 Disposal ick ampe Ro ero RC p 332 Filter ouod em dere e hdd 332 Materials Added to crac nran dirat aranaise 332 Recommendation piai 330 359 VISCOSIU ioudtaew ee ede oes ba ced a gts 331 Onboard Diagnostic System 326 327 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 134 Operator Manual Owner s Man
61. 5 Key In Ignition Reminder i 15 H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 15 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 15 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 15 W Sentry KeyB iioi aseo riitese 16 Replacement Keys 000000 17 Customer Key Programming 18 General Information 000 19 lll Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 To Set The Security Alarm 19 To Disarm The System seeto oi tassas mins 20 Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual Override see e ac ee aces 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door AII First Press Illuminated Approach If Equipped To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 23 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock us Be be ba eae as 24 Using The Panic Alarm 24 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 General Information 4 25 RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 ia oor Locks reciten 23464 240364445008 27 Manual Door Locks liliis 27 Power Door Locks llle 28 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped ll Power Windows If Equipped
62. 74 Emergency In Case of JUMP Starting sk assa ERE das a RR Bos 317 TOWING aocas ere er gore oed dou anes 320 Emission Control System Maintenance 327 364 Engine ise ese e Shae wd ed Reed 325 Break In Recommendations 69 Checking Oil Level 00000 329 Soeur dem T pr 339 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 300 Fuel Requirements llle 296 Jump Starting saeed ne a eee 317 Olla ad ea baa EP TIRAS E Ne 329 359 360 Oil Change Interval lees 330 Oil Filler Cap 396 INDEX EBENEN Oil Filter cin a4 Gate ae ES Kae EE en e 360 Oil Selection ssi o men 330 Overheating bsec Re RE ERE RN 306 Temperature Gauge o creses aperet enres 164 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 57 Ethanol rese reser y ER eee 297 Event Data Recorder 000000 58 Exhaust Gas Caution 35 70 300 337 338 Exhaust System 2 sepas RE e RS Rs 337 Filler Location Fuel 000000050 164 Filters Air Clean t 22 9 x Re eS 332 Engine Oil iim e hn 332 360 Flashers 52 9 9 9 Rene 306 Hazard Warning 00000 ess 306 Turn Signal ss se pee aa ea Ged oe ie os 170 357 Flooded Engine Starting 4 251 Fluid Brake oro eves eee eee eee m 361 Fluid Capacities 6 0 eee 359 Fluid Leaks ss seedg ke eR OR Eds 72 Fluid Level Checks Brake eu tied io om PI Red aed obs 345 Power Steenng ac See o RR Rh 258 PIAS utei RGA ean Sal aod eee
63. 76 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely e
64. 77 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 11 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter D 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Ooo Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the foll
65. A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the
66. AG are embossed on the airbag covers 022607070 Airbag and Knee Bolster Location 1 Driver Airbag 3 Knee Bolster 2 Passenger Airbag 4 Knee Bolster NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Side Curtain Airbag Location 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equippe
67. Adjust the flat drivers side outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex passenger side outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Power Mirrors If Equipped The control for the power mirrors is located on the drivers door trim panel Power Mirror Control 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left WARNING or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the convex mirror will look smaller and farther away center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror
68. Cafe 4xeda esed eek ed PER 347 Assistance Towing lees 96 Automatic Dimming Mirror 78 Automatic Door Locks issus 28 29 Automatic Transaxle lesse 12 Battery EU 333 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Beverage Cooler sees 154 Body Mechanism Lubrication 336 B Pillar Location 1 2 0 cee eee eee 275 Brake Assist System 264 en INDEX 393 Brake Control System Electronic 264 Brake Fluid 22sss ce nis oven a des ES 361 Brake Parking 0 0 6 e een ee 259 Brake System 52 ls s exte 260 345 Anti Lock ABS re cresterea c eee eee 261 Fluid Check i424 eR ker nee 345 Master Cylinder xe kk em acra do mede 345 Parking entans DRE RE enkat dak 259 Warning Light x edvuex amaaa peerless 169 Brak8S acere ton udo S od ed se E td 260 345 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 69 Bulb Replacement 2050 355 356 Bulbs Light mee RR ER RLERRPETEREAS 355 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 359 Capacities Fluid sigs sisie ia g a pi agn an 359 Caps Filler Fuels scm MR ie eae aA 301 Oil Engine Power Steering sucas mno 6 eee a ee eee 258 Car Washes cc icici gos he ean gee Ron 348 Carbon Monoxide Warning 300 Cargo Area Covert iis s eee bu oS 149 Cargo Area Features ecesas lees 147 Cargo Compartment Eight 147 Cargo Light 23 0024 engige
69. D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary D Replace the air conditioning filter 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Rotate tires J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot w
70. DERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se COOLED BEVERAGE STORAGE BIN GLOVE COMPARTMENT IF EQUIPPED The upper storage bin door swings upward to present the contents of the long shallow bin that can store items out of sight Beneath this bin is the glove compartment The large glove compartment door swings downward and features two levels of storage The upper bin functions as a Cooled Beverage Storage Bin for vehicles equipped with air conditioning for storing up to four 20 oz 1 L bottles or cans When desired cool air enters the com partment to keep the contents cool depending on ambi ent temperature and A C settings Glove Compartment And Cooled Beverage Storage NOTE The use of the Cooled Beverage Storage Bin is for nonperishable beverages only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To operate the beverage cooler pull the slide control about 0 5 in 12 mm toward the passenger compartment This will allow cool air to enter the beverage cooler To shut off the beverage cooler when not in use push the slide control back 0 5 in 12 mm This will prevent cool air from entering the passenger compartment when in heat mode Positioning Slide Control Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for storage The lower bin holds the Owner s Manual and other important documents Another storage bin is lo cated on the outboard side of the steering wheel and can hold small items
71. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people
72. EHICLE M Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called express close During express close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during express close operation If an obstruc tion in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to express close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called express vent and will oc
73. ENT CLUSTER 81c92ded 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 2 Fuel Door Indicator This indicates that the Fuel Filler Door is s located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem CAR perature Any reading below the red 260 F 126 6 C area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or in heavy stop and go traffic If the pointer rises to the red mark 260 F 126 6 C the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the red mark 260 F 126 6 C turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
74. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellul
75. ING YOUR VEHICLE RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182c72 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Manual Door Lock Plunger WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Con
76. ION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check
77. License Lights ick ede Ro nee 357 Center High Mounted Stoplight 358 Bi Fluids And Capacities 0 0 359 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 360 Engine ica e acr aos Oder ER E an OR 360 Chassis sss mr e exe ey s eu 361 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L TURBO 81c97582 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Power Distribution Center 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as maintaining engine emissions well within current government regu lations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist an authorized service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUT
78. Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 274 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was ma
79. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 20Amp _ CCN Power Locks 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact Yellow Green PWR Feed 11 15Amp Power Outlet 19 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 and Lt Blue Yellow Amp 2 Feed 12 20Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter 20 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio Yellow Lt Blue 13 20 Amp Pwr run Acc Outlet 21 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus Yellow RR Red Mod Siren 14 10Amp IOD CCN Interior 22 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC Red Lighting Red Compass Sensor 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat 23 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Green tery Feed Lt Blue 3 16 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Cigar 24 15 Amp Power Sunroof Feed Lt Blue Ltr Sunroof Lt Blue 17 10Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror Red Red 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 26 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed 34 30 Amp ABS Valve Feed Lt Blue 2 Pink 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Red Feed Green 28 10Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM 36 30 Amp Headlight Washer Red Feed Pink Control Smart Glass 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re Cool Down Pump quired 37 25 Amp 110 Inverter 30 20Amp Heated Seats Natural Yellow 31 10Amp Headlight Washer Red Relay Control 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control Pink Feed 1 33 10 Amp ABS MOD J1962
80. MEM SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn
81. MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 364 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 364 9 o Tan Eoi Ee E717 mMoZ2zr2zamazZz rz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center E
82. MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate ebps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 AREA qp 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 dac kn 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multis
83. NDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 12 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 13 OdometerlTrip Odometer This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door gate ajar and gASCAP loose gas cap and Change Oil message NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all warnings including door and gATE and Oil Change Required will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle In formation Center If Equipped in Section 3 Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dep
84. NEL Se the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 an
85. NG AND OPERATING EBENEN ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM If your vehicle is equipped with the advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Program ESP AII four systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are com monly referred to as ESP Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To recei
86. OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phoneboo
87. Or QUOC tig BERD Deed dre dele wq E eae eH 251 If Engine Fails To Start 251 After Starting esee eee sen Ra 252 Turbocharger Cool Down 252 W Manual Transaxle 0 00040 252 Downshifting 0 0 eee ee 253 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces Acceleration WRACHOML onc doe Ne artic Sea hake AES ake Bl Driving Through Water 0 Flowing Rising Water Shallow Standing Water li Power Steering ess dias Power Steering Fluid Check Mi Parking Brake cose sero n 248 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN B Brake System 0 0 0 0 00000000000 260 Tire Inflation Pressures 280 Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Radial Ply TiS career Margie en 282 BGPP pierre toit Erie saddle d di Tire Spinning 0200 0 00 eee 282 H Electronic Brake Control System 264 Tread Wear Indicators LL L LLL 283 Teashon Entra System TES senan 208 Life Of Tire oaoa aaa 284 a a srt 268 Replacement Tires llle 284 Blesitonio sind oU Lim ESI cust 26 WiTreCh ns 0 eee 285 Bi Tire Safety Information 270 E Snow Tires issu 286 ISBN vepres a itdads 20 E Tire Rotation Recommendations 286 Tire Iden
88. RES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second X The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the multifunction lever The multifunction lever is located on the right side of the steering column Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the multifunction lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the multifunction lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval pre viously selected If the multifunction lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off 81c88b52 Washer Control mm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Mist Feature Push down on the multifunction lever to activate a single CAUTION wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and a passing vehicle As long as the multifu
89. RUMENT PANEL 201 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to ela
90. Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a ood Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 367 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMM yo l 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service i 18 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires N filter LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the ME Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary E J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter S J Inspect the CV joints C J Inspect e
91. S 9e 8 oe um AU o cR Uie EEE SUR UR CR UR EADE ANAE 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE cc cccecccccccccccceccce 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eese hh m nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece ccc cccrceccreccccecs 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc c cece reece ewer hh m mnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cence reece eee ee cece hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4435939459999 59949 v 9e vy OTE OCTET OT EEO 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc cece cece recs e tn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece ccc ccc ccc ssas srra hh hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 huma ER E Sree HEU RE QU e Gnd Osea a Wilk 101 BEE AC9 AURA SSNS co aeons ius Oe is INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction sseen nA 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 E How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EN INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable o
92. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that c
93. S c cinders ast dat 165 General Information 19 109 296 General Maintenance 0000 329 Glass Cleaning 4 e4 deep RR SOS asi 350 Glove Compartment 000005 154 Hands Free Phone UConnect 81 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 6 0 eee 255 Hazard Warning Flasher 306 Head Restraints 0 0 c eee eee 118 Headlights esses ies m ake peda ee RE 356 Cleaning vai aee eee e REALE garb hk a 350 High Beam s sca of ices pcb ann diac See die 125 174 10 398 INDEX MM High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 125 PASSING xus ss baee ha we Hae Oe E 126 Replacitig ichs tone 3 had RTI nar 356 SWIG 15 2 eure dor Ped o Ton ug eo 123 Heated Seats occ adorarea dn EnEn EN ERER 117 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 134 Hood Release llle 121 Ignition 433a dos x ORO Se haa eae ROI s 12 Key icd p grece de eR eaa e eed 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key llus 16 20 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 61 Information Center Vehicle 174 Inside Rearview Mirror sls 77 Instrument Cluster 0 0 00 0005 163 164 Instrument Panel and Controls 161 Instrument Panel Cover lus 351 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 351 Integrated Power Module Fuses
94. TANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of mu
95. TER ARD IE IMEE FOR UCONNE I HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID ANO WASHER RELEASE HANDLE HRLDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS x C E SES aa si id T MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN ToP ue MANUAL 180 010505550 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title dd Vehicle Identification Number en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS is Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Word About Your Keys 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Locking Doors With The Key 1
96. U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat Belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire pressure monitoring system status ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the U
97. VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 2 4L Turbo 325 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 326 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 326 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs siue eb ee remeras 327 lI Replacement Parts o ces xe re n Rm 328 W Dealer Service ics esa rte RE 329 Bi Maintenance Procedures 4 329 Engine OIL vet bee hse Geta Rar dcn 329 Engine Air Cleaner Filter lun 332 Maintenance Free Battery 333 Air Conditioner Maintenance 335 Body Lubrication llle Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System llle lesse Cooling System less 339 Brake System soia 1 0 0 0 2 ee eee ae 345 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Manual Transaxle 0000 4 346 Appearance Care And Protection From COFFOSIOR uo ks eux bate d e elas wa 347 nC P 352 Integrated Power Module 352 B Vehicle Storage 0 0 0 0 00000 355 H Replacement Bulbs 000 355 H Bulb Replacement ser RR 356 Headlights Front Parking Front Turn Signal sra werd nee nw RIPE ME 356 Fog Lights 4 necem ene 356 Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lighiss cs ecg deen gee kinda n 357
98. VIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrume
99. VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Io Switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni ey y say Bt tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting e Frequency to change the frequency for VR is different then the audio system 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key e Next Station to select the next station Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel e Previous Channel to select the previous channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Select Name to say the name of a channel
100. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over the battery when attaching the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 6 If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immo bilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or ESP turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a
101. able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Positioning Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchor age and move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjustable Anchorage 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt
102. able when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if
103. action can cause sudden pulling of the CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Kee
104. am age can result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information Continued WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authori
105. am ESP is combined with Brake BAS Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible i Each tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper
106. an add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Commands In this mode you can say the following commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported e Disc to switch to the disc mode PRO ROO ES active e Memo to switch to the memo recorder 3 Changing the Volume e Radio to switch to the radio mode e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium 2 Say a command e g Help Wave If Equipped 3 Use the ON OFF
107. an be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have a e restraint manufacturer s directions distinctive label To operate the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this e section When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave
108. an peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button
109. and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
110. ant Women 000006 47 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eae 61 Front Seat xcd cites 2a SA Rae EX EA 36 Pretensioners 2 0 000 eee 45 Rear Seat 44404 2ea4 ed ee ee ea eRe a 36 Seat Belts Sedan 0 2 00 ee eee 35 Seats idu ROGER GEA a i aA a Meas 114 Adjustment xia oer bres are ed 114 Head Restraints 0 0 0 ee argia 118 Heated a5 oo 58S ace x OPER OR eS 117 Lumbar Support ssec RR aes 116 Rear Folding 4 49234 6 renes 119 Rear Folding Sedan 119 Seatback Release llle 116 MAINS mee Ee RENE Rer YE 116 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of Oil llle 330 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 20 Sentry Key Programming 04 18 Sentry Key Replacement lille 17 Service Assistance llle 383 Service Contract ciel eee ea ee Ree a 385 Service Manuals llle 387 Setting the Clock 187 190 204 208 217 Settings Personal ca bees pee en 181 Shoulder Belts i42 ace Sank me Wank Ae Bed 36 Side Airbag cus sa onunu ey harness 55 10 404 INDEX ae Side Window Demisters Defrosters 246 Signals TUM suis ie RR rns 170 357 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 254 Snow Chains Tire Chains 285 STOW 65 us ie sace dta ire athe ae amide dn 286 Sound System Kicker 1459 tear acra E a ei a aoe eee 233 Speed Control Cruise Control
111. ar phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espan
112. ase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with
113. at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain air bags do not install a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks or similarly mounted A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the bags e When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster it signals the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster The Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster inflates rearward towards the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position you for the best interaction with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds this is only about half the time it takes to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or
114. at tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until having the tire repaired or replaced A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician im mediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immedi ately Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment 8 when operating the TIREFIT kit WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 TIREFIT Kit Components amp Operation 5 Power Plug amp Cable 6 Air Pump Hose Black 7 Sealant Hose Clear with Yellow Cap 8 Accessory Storage Compartment Using the Mode Select Knob amp Hoses P Selecting Air Mode D Turn the Mode S
115. atback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the seat forward and flat Rear Seat Folded Flat Folding Rear Seat 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ee For additional comfort pull the strap forward just WARNING enough to release the seatback latch Then push the e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people maximum and release the strap riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Reclining The Rear Seat en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel Hood Release 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood 81c97590 Safety Catch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the left side right side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS To prevent possible damage do not slam
116. ate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button t
117. ault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 202 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will
118. can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 280 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in hig
119. ce message and the current vari ance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two seconds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least one second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Variance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Using a quick button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Using a long button press more than one second press the EVIC button this will place the Compass in calibration mode The CAL indicator will come on con tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com pass is now in the calibration mod
120. ce Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required evaporative loss of the battery fluid WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Continued 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Continued Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive 4 and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery d
121. cellular phone Owners Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section For identification purposes you will be prompt
122. cept REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the pres
123. cle Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting pro may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle cedure 5 This type of start can be dangerous if done improp WARNING erly so follow the procedure carefully See Section 6 of this manual for jump aterting instractiohs Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 252 STARTING AND OPERATING EBEN CAUTION MANUAL TRANSAXLE WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As This vehicle is equipped with an after ru
124. contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the following conditions exist e The lubricant has become contaminated with water If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
125. could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Mirror Directions en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward oes paean i z ues 2 Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE Thesales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect websi
126. ct either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the con trol is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode 81caad23 Panel gt gt Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demister outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help
127. ctive display that is located in the instrument cluster E 14 F FM 101 1 10 81c8b5a7 The EVIC consists of the following e System status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal settings customer programmable features e Compass heading UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Audio mode display e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg e RKE Battery Low with a single chime EVIC Functions e Personal Settings Not Available e Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h e Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Gate Ajar with a single chime e Headlamps On EVIC Step Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func e Check TPM System tions are displayed on the EVIC e Key In Ignition
128. cur regardless of the sunroof position During express vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS NOTE Due to overload protection the inverter will There is a standard 12 Volt power outlet in the instru shut down if the power rating is exceeded ment panel for added convenience This out
129. d and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number wi
130. d correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Ca e Or IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE BEEN Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Il toll free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of th
131. d includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the
132. d with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the driver s inflatable knee blocker and the integrated passenger knee blocker non inflatable to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that
133. ded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
134. ds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Setting The Compass Variance And Compass Calibration Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings LN MT M x O 6 718 V9 To Set the Variance with the ignition in the ON position with a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button 040506040 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Varian
135. dt eed 360 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 360 Fog Lights sectario te 124 171 356 Folding Rear Seat sprc sema a 119 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 000 119 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 319 Front Position Light 24 2 4 rb es 356 Fuel ose Ee exa hr eens ES 296 360 Adding uiu erue ERES Es RS Ie Ses 301 Additives occ ccc bese a bna e 299 Capacity 0c ad tact va Sem oad Os Ges ohh 359 Clean Air 2222s ni rn tr rs 297 Eth n l sex esie nt es UE E Red utn 297 Filler Cap Gas Cap en INDEX 397 Filler Door Gas Cap isses 164 Gasoline cag eee a n p RS G a OD Pee RR 296 Gauge na diaaieaesedeaeee das tate desi 164 Light ii cca e em Some a done 165 Materials Added 0 0 0 00 00 eee eee 299 Methanol ieu dace dive AS ie ae ae RR dt 297 Octane Rating 4 seek mar alk neas 296 Requirements seseris bine canadian eras ok 296 Tank Capacity ix espe eau oe k aeaiia aca 359 Fuel System Caution 0000000000 303 Fueling sara hs beh dor tas dere ehe dre 301 Buses 2214969 RS ee rae BS 352 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 134 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 301 302 326 Gasoline Clean Air llle 297 Gasoline Fuel 0 020005 296 359 Gasoline Reformulated rss 297 Gauges Coolant Temperature 00000 164 Fuels wits sce pr cine heeds tines 164 Odometer ii 234 0008 Ge eae Geet Red 167 Tachometer qase x s NORRI
136. e FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front or rear wheels elevated e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever MAINTAINING YOUR
137. e Moisture and ice can also accumulate on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in headliner and or electronic component damage For maximum defogging press the Recirculation button until recirculate is off Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system during the Winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum may reduce airflow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0 250 Normal Starting 0000 250 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F
138. e V A i OWNER S MANUAL lIer rci VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION iei t e
139. e and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 5 A short EVIC button press from the Calibrate Com pass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal operating mode 6 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed timekeeping is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink m 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol knob 3 After the hours are adjusted push the TUNE AUDIO control knob to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE AUDIO control knob 5 To exit press any butt
140. e Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warn
141. e engine to run for two seconds and stop Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft 20 m using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 8163e6a8 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the REK transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC i
142. e if supported by the DVD disc if equipped 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a de
143. e ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the BS doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle Auto Unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 The drivers door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped Insert the tip of
144. e ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 17 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 If the l
145. e illuminated and set the temperature control to its 81cab384 coolest setting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e See Circulation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Air Filtration System If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a charcoal layer The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts only on air coming from outside the vehicle it does not filter air inside the passenger compartment See the maintenance schedule for the filter change interval The air filter change interval coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions See your authorized dealer for service 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle Set the Fan control to the high position AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS full clockwise Press the 4 button Set the Mode control at or between VERY HOT L and 24 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed 4 from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort If it s sunny
146. e lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean
147. e num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT EN STARTING AND OPERATING 299 content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi cle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance or damage the emissions control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune
148. e streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not engine coolant antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercis
149. eR enr UR APR dc ad i eae 383 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 385 Prepare For The Appointment 383 Service Contract i cee eee eee 385 Prepare A Lists eek rede ede Cere 383 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 386 Be Reasonable With Requests 33 MMMOPAR Parts 00 00004 386 H If You Need Assistance sese 383 Mi Reporting Safety Defects 386 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 384 In The 50 United States And Washington Clisler Canada Inc Customer Canter 384 Diu Sung sedia us icu dm 386 9 In Mexico Coritact a cus e 384 CEM sas dero sqb irae Tye d 382 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE IEEE Bl Publication Order Forms 387 Traction Grades iles ea 389 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 0 390 Quality Grades i cse cet a 389 Treadwear lees 389 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 383 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your
150. eadlight Switch 00000 123 Headlights 0 0 0 0 0000000 123 High Beam Indicator lille 174 Instrument Cluster 0 000005 123 LICENSE MD rears a ns aie ae ah ee ee 357 Lights On Reminder 00 124 Low Fuel cupere ad A dura RUE RR RR 165 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 173 Map Reading 3s ce ERR 126 Oil Pressure su eR Rer a 166 Seat Belt Reminder soros serro ekta tanne 166 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 165 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 171 Traction Control 0 0 00 eee eee 266 Turn Signal sendiers ereenn t eae 122 124 357 Voltage s esasoicerdebeas Wee eae enge 165 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 164 400 INDEX MM Loading Vehicle YES 4i ce Ro ed G PE bd Rae BE GG prb 275 Locks Child Protection 22e RR ba aes 30 DOOL MC 27 Power Dooi uude EGER UR 28 Steering Wheel ns 4 aca odore deae ege es 15 Lubrication Body 2 ako 336 Lumbar Support lesse 116 Maintenance Free Battery o sescca ansaa sisas 333 Maintenance General nnana annaa aeaa 329 Maintenance Procedures 000000005 329 Maintenance Schedule Ln 364 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 173 327 Manual Service llle 387 Manual Transaxle llle 252 346 Downshifting sees 253 Fluid Level Check 0
151. eat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRB
152. eather above 90 F 32 C M A B IN 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or IM Schedule 102 Months Maintenance i 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule D 1 Rotate tires 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil M 2 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter E engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires am L1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant J Replace the air conditioning filter Q Replace the spark plugs S lm Inspect the CV joints IM a Inspect exhaust system E 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary D J Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioni
153. eckup may be needed NOTE The Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
154. ed to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name Dial by Saying a Number e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the foll
155. ed when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to
156. edule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if DLL necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes _I Replace the air conditioning filter L 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or Schedule 78 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 2 Rotate tires T Change the engine oil and engine oil JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Replace the air conditioning filter LI Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system d Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E
157. ehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering stranded wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering passengers and others around you pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 258 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and o
158. eir use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM WARNING Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
159. elect knob 4 to this position 5 D for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 6 when selecting this mode 6 Selecting Sealant Air Mode PS Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose Clear hose with the Yellow Cap 7 when selecting this mode 8taced9c 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Pressure Gauge 3 Air Pump Power Button 4 Mode Select Knob 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using the Air Pump Power Button Sealing a Tire with TIRE FIT A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT A 1 Turn ON the vehicle s hazard warning flashers Push and release the button 3 once to turn ON the TIREFIT kit Push and release the button 3 again to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn OFF the ignition 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up to Use TIREFIT 1 Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com partment 8
160. em monitors the doors hood liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized op eration If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm system the horn will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the horn will sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm system is fully armed To Disarm The System 1 Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter 2 Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key will disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm A valid key is one that is programmed to your vehicle A valid key will disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system an invalid key will allow th
161. emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M 272 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra
162. endent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 14 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 15 OdometerlTIrip Odometer Display Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset 16 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the YA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle th
163. enter High Mounted Stop Light CHMSE uere do epe URS LED Assembly Rear Turn Tail Stop steere sentein tegite si 3157 Backup Light ssp tiani a e nas W16W 921 License light use eee XR Rte W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights Front Parking Front Turn Signal See your authorized dealer for replacement Fog Lights 1 Access light through the lower fascia cutout 2 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 3 Twist and remove socket from light 4 Remove the bulb from the socket and replace License Lights 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate 3 Pull bulb off connector Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lights 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing 2 Grasp the tail light and pull firmly to disengage the light from the aperture panel 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 8180e72a 81800122 Center High Mounted Stoplight 3 Pull the bulb from the socket The light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Turbo Engine SAE 0W 40 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters Cooling System MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Miles Formula 7 5 Quart
164. epair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h EN STARTING AND OPERATING 263 ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals mm All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 204 STARTI
165. ess the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and sa
166. ession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate Eum GI 042305233 RES RSC Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to oper
167. et channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a to
168. etiwed e oe 147 Cargo Load BloOE 4 mv eS RR 149 Cargo Tie DOWnS i43 sees ae Dex e emis 150 Caution Exhaust Gas llle 70 Cellular Phone 00 000 ce eee eens 81 238 Center High Mounted Stop Light 358 Chains Tire ua p Rv VERS Wee 285 Chart lire Sizing osoo sss t ses 272 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light Child Restraint Child Restraint Tether Anchors 394 INDEX ae Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 64 Child Safety Locks 0 0 00000000 30 Child S at 2 24 ede pruRERY hones washes 68 Clean Air Gasoline llis 297 Cleaning Wheels uuxzsdeekes ee RR REX Ca 408 ER es 349 Climate Control 2 succ rm whee eases 238 Clock uias i eR ERR 187 190 204 208 217 Coin Holder i2o2ex44 wERE Re 146 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 237 Compass Variance iu aac dc a Rn dede e 185 Console 1422243223939 9 xk x ee REY Re a 146 Contract Service ee eee 385 Cool Down Turbo a sue cide ea RR Ra Y 252 Coolant Antifreeze 1 0 0 0 0000 359 360 Cooler Beverage 6 0 eee 154 Cooling System 6 6 6 339 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 341 Coolant Level llle 340 343 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 343 Drain Flush and Refill Ln 340 INSPECHON s Lees prc ax Re ETE an ERA 343 Points to Remember LL 342 344 Presstire Cap asuedeusrse ERR nS RR RC e 342 Selection o
169. eturn to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine
170. eze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning lamp is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a ch
171. f Coolant Antifreeze 340 Corrosion Protection lille 347 Cruselight 25 62 24 De 94 ER RI 168 Cupholders i eder cae ere ne Reda 146 Customer Assistance llle 383 Data Recorder Event 00 000008 58 Dealer Service lees 329 Defroster Rear Window s 153 Defroster Windshield Ls 71 240 Delay Intermittent Wipers 128 Diagnostic System Onboard 326 Dimmer Switch Headlight 125 en INDEX 395 Dipsticks Power Steering 66 eee ee eee 258 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 343 Engine OI ia ete se wd earning m e deen ps 332 Door Eocks eresas Rer Ree 27 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 28 Door Opener Garage i42 134 Downsh fting aces teer eb ERR en ds 253 Driver s Seat Back Tilt lille 116 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 0000 254 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water coss ets ey RE 255 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 0 79 Electrical Power Outlets 04 144 Electronic Brake Control System 264 Brake Assist System llle 264 Electronic Stability Program 265 Traction Control System 200 264 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 131 Electronic Stability Program ESP 265 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 1
172. f the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly 0 Y e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1
173. fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for Ij leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel
174. fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types PIDE Ape Display Poraa Type 16 Digit us e Personality Ferny Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE GNIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft caes ollege Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i L pors pors Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t M Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exite
175. fault audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The user will have
176. features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel s Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint Routing Rear Center Shoulder Belt Di 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click vs 5 Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision connec Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 8 Position the s
177. fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types PIDE Ape Display Poraa Type 16 Digit us e Personality Ferny Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE GNIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft caes ollege Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i Lo ports spots Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t M Wea
178. g the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the Electronic Speed Control lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning OFF the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is on speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once w
179. g your arms to reach Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If the steering wheel or instrument panel You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work The front airbag system consists of the following with your seat belt to restrain you properly In e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped airbags e Airbag Warning Light Continued Driver Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side win How The Airbag System Works dows if equipped e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines Steering Wheel and Column if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation e Interconnecting Wiring from direction provided by the ORC This ORC will detect rollover e Instrument Panel e Seatbelt Reminder Light The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in e Drive
180. ge e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your
181. gins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the veh
182. h the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the scree
183. he ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor e If key won t turn and steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure EE STARTING AND OPERATING 251 If Engine Fails to Start WARNING If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded started ignite and damage the converter and vehi
184. he infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If a child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster ee THING
185. he instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the 294 STARTING AND OPERATING EE graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is c
186. he last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM If Equipped Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle is stopped Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol or Francais depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped section of this manual for details 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the doors will unlock when the driver
187. he radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Section 3 Dolby Laboratories For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR referto Macrovision Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in SSUBUR E unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If engineering or disassembly is prohibited E Led llite Radio in this section D E PUE E DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The Operating Instructions Video Entertainment ater Systems Inc System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch sc
188. her fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted and the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per
189. hicle Gauge 2 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 7 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 8 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 at your nearest autho rized Mopar parts dealership as soon as possible Refer to H Sealant Bottle Replacement G Distributing TIREFIT Sealant to Better Enable Tire Inflation NOTE Use this procedure only if directed here from Step 1 of D After Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Clear Sealant Hose 7 from the valve stem reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle 1 Press the Air Pump Power Button 3 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit Then disconnect the CAUTION Failure to reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 can result in sealant contacting your skin clothing and the vehi cle s interior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components causing permanent damage to the kit 2 Drive the vehicle forward approximately 30 to 50 feet 9 to 15 m to distribute the sealant more evenly within the tire 3 Return to Step 1 of D After Injecting TIREFIT Sealant and attempt to inflate the tire However this time if the tire fails to inflate to 26 psi 1 8 bar within 15 minutes the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call
190. hol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if Cavity Cartridge Mini Description the buckles do not work properly Fuse Fuse Dry with a soft cloth 3 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Red Feed FUSES 4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Red Integrated Power Module 1 The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This Jallow center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label 6 10 Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir Red Ocm Steering Cntrl that identifies each component may be printed on the Sdan Hands Ered inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Phone this section of the Owner s Manual for the underhood location of the Integrated Power Module IPM 4 ees I pensel Cavity Cartridge Mini Description 8 30 Amp IOD Sense2 Fuse Fuse Green 1 Empty Empty 9 40 Amp Power Seats 2 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Green Lt Blue Feed ee
191. hone 81 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 161 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 389 Universal Transmitter 02005 134 Unleaded Gasoline illie 296 Vanity Mirrors 2 xa eoe x en ye ec E risi 81 Variance COMpass is bak Ra e Erde 185 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading llle 275 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage e Rm Rs 355 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 19 Voice Recognition System VR 109 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 164 Warnings and Cautions Warranty Information 05 386 Washer Adding Fluid 00 337 Washers Windshield sess 128 Washing Vehicle s i onte oen 348 Water Driving Through 00000 255 Wheel and Wheel Trim 05 349 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 349 Wind Buffeting suce qp RR oe da S 143 Window Airbag Side Curtain 49 Window Fogging llle 245 Wind OWS cece arenie Revue RP e e cw Gad 32 POWST nor dint Acids adea do aie telat ed aps 32 Windshield Washers 127 128 337 FIG 0 5 cebeiecee hha eee ad eR rd 337 Windshield Wipers so stedi sotn ehir uati 127 336 Wipers Intermittent 00000 128 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into
192. houlder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle i Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Airbag Section Like the front airbags 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is
193. icator Light MIL is part of t an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans amp e3 mission control systems The MIL will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 25 High Beam Indicator E This light shows that the headlights are on high 777 beam Push the turn signal lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 26 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will switch between the different EVIC functions 27 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped Refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for more information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver intera
194. icle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
195. ide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out plate into the buckle until you hear a click the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The Latch Plate en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear yo
196. ield Washers 04 128 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Mist Feature s a acute ade xg YS 129 Using Homelink Mi Tilt Steering Column 000 0 130 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 131 PU Sn Aiea ne ieee eee ata ae To Activate ciis eee 131 ALL 133 To Set At A Desired Speed o on u00 132 Troubleshooting Tips 139 PRI DERE 132 General Information 140 do Resuine Speed e cos conac lt eeacuhese 132 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 140 To Vary The Speed Setting 132 Opening The Sunroof 141 Manual Transaxle less 133 E TNE SUOON af pean diadstaenfe quisa s 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Pinch Protect Feature 06 142 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Pinch Protect Override 0 142 Mashghh dt E puppi ova sedeat d taque ad Venting Sunroof Express 143 Cargo COYGE IGEQUIDBESE dini we sted xii Sunshade Operation cesses 143 Removable Load Floor 149 Wind Buffeting 0 00 0 0 00 eu 143 EGIEO ON LOOPS te hase eet es d Sunroof Maintenance isses sess 143 Hole DOWIEOpen serm TE EQUIDPSO s Tal Ignition Off Operation AEE 143 Bl Rear Window Features
197. ight remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately
198. ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light be
199. ilable operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial ESP for specific reasons as noted below Partial ESP This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial ESP mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled the thresholds for ESP activation are raised and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illu minated This mode is intended to be used for a more spirited driving experience or if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP ESP OFF switch OFF WARNING In the Partial ESP mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavail able NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial ESP mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial ESP mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momen tarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motio
200. ill allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechani
201. ill be shown The feature will be disabled if the park brake is engaged The braking distance measurement will be aborted if the brake is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop 0 60 mph 0 100 kp h When the 0 60 mph 100 kp h screen is active the time that the vehicle takes to reach 60 mph 100 kp h will be displayed The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph The SEC text will flash indicating that conditions are met for the event to begin If the vehicle does not reach 60 mph 100 kp h in less then 10 seconds the display will revert back to dashes Pressing the trip button will display the vehicle best time to 60 mph 100 kp h To clear the vehicle best hold the TRIP button then press and release the EVIC button This will reset the best and current values 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se G Force When the G force screen is active all four G force values will be displayed two longitude and two latitude e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the values as it climbs As the G forces fall in value the peak forces are held After zero G is measured in the vehicle the peak values will continue to be displayed for three seconds After three seconds the value will revert back to zero Compass Temperature Audio If Equipped Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle
202. ill cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will
203. ill result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is on push down and hold SET DECEL Release the Elec tronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result
204. in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING With the ESP switched OFE the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off highway or off road only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control S
205. ing wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increa
206. ings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light 290 STARTING AND OPERATING EBEN e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System I X Thi
207. injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even sl
208. io Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 2Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and
209. irflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 81caad41 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Circulation Control Use this button to choose between outside air intake or Recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Only use the recirculate mode to tempo rarily block out any outside odors 81caad32 smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Normal Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illumi nate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged 81caad38 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Air Conditioning MAX A C For maximum cooling select the air direction to either the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Press the A C button and the Recirculation button so that both lamps ar
210. is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since t
211. is on the multifunction lever O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the Low beam headlights and pull out the end of the control lever 81c84c37 Fog Light Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it You can signal a lane change by moving the lever would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective partially up or down without moving beyond the detent High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Push the lever away from you again to switch the headlights back to low beam Turn Signal Control If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb High Beam Low Beam Control 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released NOTE If the m
212. ith other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or continuously for longer than 30 seconds without stopping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING e Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gen erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Continued e Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced a 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm Whe
213. ition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information avail
214. ity filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE For vehicles with a Turbo engine a small amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is normal The amount will depend on driving style The air cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make up air filter element should be installed during the normal air filter maintenance procedure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 CAUTION When servicing the battery always reinstall the bat tery thermowrap The thermowrap provides battery heat protection and will extend overall battery life Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenan
215. k you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Er
216. kit E Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 miles 8 km to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 WARNING e f the pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the vehicle further Call for assistance tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using e If the pressure is equal to or greater than 19 psi 1 3 bar but less than the level indicated on the tire pressure label proceed to Step 4 of this procedure TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until having the tire repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e If the pressure is at the level indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar proceed F After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire to Step 5 of this procedure 1 Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to the Air 4 Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire Im Mode position pressure label on the driver side latch pillar 5 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and 2 Uncoil the Black Air Pump Hose 6 and connect it to a AS GADION MIS a the valve stem 6 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the 3 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure ve
217. lash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature w
218. le you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS lt Ba Mirrors 4 ose RR ERG eas 77 WHands Free Communication UConnect Inside Day Night Mirror sess 77 I EQUIDDed exevpustiegpes pend eui eye aires ot Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Operati seess ci ves ca oe pde a seas 83 It Equipped regem eres cR ERR RR 78 Phone Call Features 00 0 91 Outside Mirror Driver s Side 78 UConnect System Features 94 Outside Mirror Passenger s Side 78 Advanced Phone Connectivity 99 Power Mirrors If Equipped 79 Things You Should Know About Your Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 0 81 UConnect System cache ker ea 101 Sun Visor Sliding Feature 000 0000 81 General Information 109 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee
219. let can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a Three Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 12 Volt Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 CAUTION CUPHOLDERS Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw two cupholders located in the front power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the Front Cupholders generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See There are also two cupholders located in the back for the CONSOLE FEATURES rear passengers The floor console s sliding armrest
220. ll display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels c
221. lly down toward the floor NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position Parking Brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 260 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lin
222. ltisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate ebps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 ASH OA 332 95 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 dnce d an 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
223. lug 5 to a different power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit e The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE D After Injecting TIREFIT Sealant 1 Allow the air pump to inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar Check the pressure in the tire by looking at the Pressure Gauge 2 e If the tire inflates to at least 26 psi 1 8 bar within 15 minutes proceed to Step 2 of this procedure e If tire fails to inflate to 26 psi 1 8 bar within 15 minutes perform the procedure steps described under G Distributing TIREFIT Sealant to Better Enable Tire Inflation 2 Press the Air Pump Power Button 3 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit 3 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the steering wheel 4 Disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 from the valve stem reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle CAUTION Failure to reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 can result in sealant contacting your skin clothing and the vehi cle s interior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components causing permanent damage to the
224. m In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other
225. m adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph TIREFIT KIT Small punctures in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk TIREFIT Location TIREFIT Usage Precautions NOTE e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle prior to the expi ration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 WARNING e When the TIREFIT Sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and
226. maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine LEN coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to insure that engine coolant antifreeze will r
227. moves forward 3 in 7 6 cm to accommodate shorter drivers The armrest lid also includes a unique flip pocket for holding or stowing a phone or an MP3 player The bin inside the console can hold up to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight Rear Cupholders Floor Console Flip Pocket ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 A 115 Volt outlet if equipped to power small electronics is on the console For more information on this outlet refer to Power Inverter If Equipped in Section 3 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with the console compart ment lid in the open position Cell phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury NOTE The flip pocket and console lid features are intended to be used in the upright or open position only while the vehicle is parked While driving all handheld devices should be properly stowed and the flip pocket and the console lid should be closed CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium bat
228. n 268 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESP stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode depress and hold the ESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOM ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESP OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 To turn ESP ON again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch WARNING In the ESP Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable NOTE When the ESP is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off
229. n Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE ransmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Iluminated Ap proach under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will f
230. n also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Liftgate Handle NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pre
231. n pump to cool you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending tor pedal on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time 8191bf86 Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in 1st gear not 3rd gear when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd gear STARTING AND OPERATING 253 For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 6th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 254 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal tr
232. n switch to the ACC Accessory position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Body Lubrication under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the
233. n the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 284 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Please see Iread Wear Indicators and Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service descrip tion and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipme
234. n where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode WIESE EATER AMES RUN JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio SIMSIQE O a O e Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio NE Push the On Vol trol knob d time to tu meee J come mere Pome Pome ame Q ve a ue vic olume contro OD a secon ime to rn mm SINGLE DISC v Ca Te D Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be 042305232 set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
235. nction lever is allow the wipers to return to the park position before held down the wipers will continue to operate turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 81918d45 Mist Control 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING To tilt the steering column push down on the lever below the multifunction lever With one hand firmly on the Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is wheel move the steering column up or down as desired moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Control en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED To Activate When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE on the right side of the steering wheel indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leavin
236. ndicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training wire is attached to the garage d
237. ne speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of premium gasoline before considering service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC that define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions
238. ner that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 of this manual for more information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 CAUTION TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Towing Chart Recreational Towing Condition Manual Transmission Vehicles Four Wheel Flat Tow all wheels on ground Yes Two Wheel Dolly Tow rear wheels on ground Yes Flat Bed Tow all wheels on bed of truck Yes 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRANSAXLES may be recreationally t
239. ng filter D 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 376 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN M A B SSS IM 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or i Schedule 126 Months Maintenance N d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule ng Rotate tires T Change the engine oil and engine oil E 2 Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter 4m 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Rotate tires jam 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes J Replace the air conditioning filter S if Inspect the CV joints IM a Inspect exhaust system E 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary D J Replace the accessory drive belt s U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 3
240. nited States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system T
241. nstructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equippede eter PR datas Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack isses Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 000 Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna ice doe a ea Se es Reception Quality Operating Instructions Satellite Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone I Equipped cig tss era om eem pad dso Ope
242. nt Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level 366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMM CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer
243. nt ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning 296 STARTING AND OPERATING limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 0 000 KR5S120123 Cariada e c dA LM se eae a 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L Turbo Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent O1 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality premium unleaded gaso 800dfab amp line with an octane rating of 91 RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engi
244. nt manufacturer or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings TIRE CHAINS approved for your vehicle Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom Never use a tire with a smaller load index or mended capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index CAUTION could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used 286 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country
245. ntinue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 If the pointer rises to the red mark 260 F 126 6 C the CAUTION instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the Driving with a hot cooling system could damage air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 260 F into the normal range If the pointer remains on the red 126 6 C pull over and stop the vehicle with the mark 260 F 126 6 C for more than a minute turn the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off engine off immediately and call for service and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the red mark 260 F 126 6 C turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning syste
246. ntrol knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a
247. nufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to E the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard Va SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR ag 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS A ARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX K 2 TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE P195 70R14 T125 70015 a 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 275 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 2
248. o combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by
249. o a vehicle best screen if appli cable 1 8 or 1 4 Mile When the 1 8 1 4 mile EVIC screen is active the time that the vehicle takes to travel 1 8 1 4 mile will be displayed along with the speed when the vehicle reaches the 1 8 1 4 mile distance The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 kp h The mph kp h and SEC text will flash indicating that conditions are met for the event to begin If the vehicle does not reach 1 8 1 4 mile distance in less than 30 seconds the EVIC will display dashes After a completed 1 8 1 4 mile event the speed and time will be displayed on the EVIC The speed and time will remain on the screen until a new perfor mance screen is selected or the vehicle speed drops to 0 mph 0 kp h and climbs past 30 mph 48 kp h Pressing the TRIP button will display the vehicle best 1 8 mile or 1 4 mile run To clear the current and vehicle best time and distance hold the trip button then press and release the EVIC button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Braking Distance When the braking distance EVIC screen is active the vehicle braking distance and speed at which the brake was depressed will be displayed This feature is available for braking that begins at a speed over 30 mph 48 kp h The mph kp h and ft m text will flash when the conditions are met to begin a braking event While a braking event is taking place the starting speed and current distance w
250. o operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Rad
251. ocation may vary with the ra u dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
252. ol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE age Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the par
253. oll control knob will begin playing the files con tained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ign
254. omatic transaxle cannot be started this way and may be damaged Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done im properly so follow this procedure carefully Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See your autho rized dealer to correct this condition 1 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK the manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to OFF for both vehicles 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 3 Using the two finger screws on the cover remove the air intake duct covering the battery 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery ee
255. on and be within the oper ating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART OW 40 Preferred F 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 100 C 29 18 12 7 0 16 27 38 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change 813eda54 Oil Viscosity Chart The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section 7 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high qual
256. on knob or wait approximately five seconds 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA 042005200 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies
257. one The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone pai
258. ontrol The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked e Seat Height Adjustment 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Manual Lumbar Driver s Seatback Recline The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard To recline side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back Hee Ihe handle up or dowi to the desired position and release the handle 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area The switch indicator lights will show when the High or Low heat is on Press the switch once to choose High two lights press it a second time to choose Low one light press it a third time to turn the heater Off no lights When High is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is
259. oor opener motor it is button The name and color of the button may vary by NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer door NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 3 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties p
260. or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage sistance when programming Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter cause serious injury or death away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ge Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink i
261. or position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses over the front of the seat when their back is against the or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS Make sure that the child is upright in the seat A long break in period is not required for the engine in e The lap portion should below on the hips and as snug your vehicle as possible Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or slouching can move the belt out of position 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high
262. otor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properl
263. ow if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expire
264. owed at any legal CALHON highway speed for any distance if the MANUAL _ Rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage TRANSAXLE is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in to the transmission will occur if a rear wheel lift is the ACC position used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 306 Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT 312 B If Your Engine Overheats 306 WiJump Starting Procedures B TIREFIU Kit oai expe ER 308 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle TIREFIT Storage eese 308 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle TIREFIT Usage Precautions 308 With Ignition Key ce socie strese riis TIREFIT Kit Components amp Operation 311 Without The Ignition Key 322 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio 81c84842 Hazard Warning Switch Press the switch and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash Press the switch a second time to turn the flashers off Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will co
265. owing trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C OO C C O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 378 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 379 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle s ee
266. owing beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded o
267. p the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 256 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing wa
268. pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free mm Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL co
269. peration of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 IO e A Wf a 9st a FLECINONIC STAHL IY TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK MASANE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM DoF a c 00 KETACTIVATE UPPER TRAD LONER es SEAT WINDOW LFT d Sno most WANG omen GUTES 4 ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTLLOCK DRIVE BRAINO SYBTEM FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM REAR FOG LAMP OUS cod DEFROSTAND VENTILATING FAN WNDOWLOCK NE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING 1QWFR AR QUTI FT ORE RRAKF TOW PT Km ec A iat BEAT BELT SLIDINC DOOR g AIR CONDITIONING TE CHOR i oa WARNING TOW HAUL s amp T 4 N co ge OA ad GLOW PLUG FOWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY UCH
270. position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against WARNING Continued the door Airbags will inflate forcefully into the space a e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument between you and the door h panel during front airbag deployment could cause 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the back comfortably extendin
271. position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm syst
272. pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly
273. properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment 8 for inflating sport balls rafts or like inflatable items However use only the Black Air Pump Hose 6 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 4 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal small punctures in the tire tread of a tire on this vehicle e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle close to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit e Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi mately 0 24 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN WARNING Continued WARNING Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to source TIREFIT is not a permanent fl
274. psed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition Dolby System VR If Equipped Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories For t
275. r products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing you
276. r Inflatable Knee Bolster the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for six to eight N seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
277. r UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UConnect for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile
278. r child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind increased head motion and possible injury to the their back child Use only the anch
279. r the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect
280. r the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type EE STARTING AND OPERATING 259 PARKING BRAKE BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the brake light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on the lever Also place the shift lever into REVERSE To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fu
281. r wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position 819197af Rear Wiper Washer Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton is located on the CAUTION bottom right side of the blower Use care when washing the inside of the rear window control knob Press this button to to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft turn on the rear window defroster cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to An amber light illuminates to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe n show that the defroster is on distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements 81caad17 The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi mately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating 154 UN
282. rating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES it Equipped itn cem ERR ee eA li Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If Bquipped is is S ct ean dole ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped se kerep bERRCHRRT ER Radio Operation CD Player e mes 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee E CD DVD Maintenance li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones Bl Climate Controls 0 0000 Climate Controls 0 0 0 0 000005 238 Air Filtration System If Equipped 243 Operating Tips scie eme 244 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES C pU S 2 81c8b5f9 1 Air Outlets 5 Glove Compartment 9 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch 2 Demisters 6 Beverage Cooler 10 Passenger Airbag Disable Light 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Storage Cubby 11 Boost Gauge 4 Radio 8 Climate Controls 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee TURBO BOOST GAUGE Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge that indi cates the intake manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure The engine management system in your vehicle intelligently regulates intake manifold pressure based on environmental ambient and engine operating condi tions Turbo Boost Gauge UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 INSTRUM
283. red with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press
284. reen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touc
285. rogramming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two o
286. rs should engage the hooks located on the back or the subwoofer 5 Check the subwoofer for being securely fastened to the seatback WARNING Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer are required for proper installation of a child re straining device In the event of an accident or under severe vehicle maneuvers leaving the subwoofer unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle Removing Subwoofer 1 Fold the right rear passenger seatback forward to unlatch the subwoofer 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Open the liftgate and remove the subwoofer 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand
287. s The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive har
288. s 7 1 Liters or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manu facturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mobil 19 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent For additional information refer to the Engine Oil Selection and Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade in the Maintenance Pro cedures section of this manual Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5AP Gap 0 030 in 0 76 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transaxle Fluid MOPAR ATF 4 MS9602 Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake flu ids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or
289. s is the TPMS warning indicator located in the 4 instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system f
290. s the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 266 STARTING AND OPERATING EE ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued e ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has three ava
291. s the liftgate opening WARNING e Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying Continued purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities Fold Down Speakers 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will activate the wiper The rea
292. se braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued 262 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However The ABS light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate r
293. sed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between
294. sm 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Ah withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode en UNDERS
295. ssure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst
296. stem is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being asses
297. stem called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa tion instructions Rear Seat LATCH ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their olde
298. tal of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo area and fastened in place using the child tether anchors located on the right rear passenger seatback 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Installing Subwoofer 2 Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor 1 Align the right outside edge of the subwoofer with the outside edge of the rib located on the load floor NOTE The left outside edge of the subwoofer will not line up with a rib on the load floor 8046405471 3 Connect the electrical connector ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 4 Fold the right rear passenger seat rearward into the upright position The rear tether ancho
299. te for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect Bluetooth system is driven through your Hands Free Profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicles UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Voice Recognition Button Actual button l
300. ter This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good e Driving through standing water limits your vehi vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical 8 km h when driving through standing water steering capability if power assist is lost Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low v
301. teries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press in on the flashlight to release it To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high mm twice for low and a third time to return to off 81814415 Press And Release Three Press Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Cargo Cover If Equipped The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Rear Cargo Area Removable Load Floor The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed with mild soap and water 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Cargo Tie Down Loops There are two D rings installed on the D pillars for securing a net acros
302. that the system is armed 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 9 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CUR tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches red 260 F 126 6 C this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the tem perature gauge to pass red 260 F 126 6 C the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool ee U
303. the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1 L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mobil 19 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 0W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in 2 4L Turbo Engine within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 40 Engine Oil is also allowed for use in 2 4L Turbo Engine The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendati
304. the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory
305. the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for prolonged period Cooling System e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan m
306. ther Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angl
307. tification Number TIN 274 Bl Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 287 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 275 Base System eee 290 Bl Tires General Information sse 279 Piirdiun System IP Tippee 292 TES C LE zm General Information 296 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Bl Fuel Requirements 000000 296 W Adding Fuel 5 ce kr Yn 301 2AL Turbo Engine ee Re Rn 296 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap ans 301 Reformulated Gasoline 297 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 302 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 297 B Trailer Towing ei sdu gen yw SERENA 303 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehides 298 Wi Recreational Towing MMT In Gasoline LLL LL LLL 298 Behind Motorhome Etc sese 303 Materials Added To Fuel 0 299 CHE im M ME Fuel System Cautions 299 Ground iss erp yo ex egere bud Carbon Monoxide Warnings 300 250 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in t
308. tinued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the drivers door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch Location Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 3 AII doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in th
309. tion such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats a number instead With a maximum number of files The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems The radio is display designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Freq
310. toxic gas dealer as soon as possible used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin Enhanced Accident Response System or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication irritation continues see your doctor If these particles network intact and the power intact the Enhanced settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac Accident Response System performs the following func turer s instructions for cleaning tions e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the Cuts off fuel to the engine airbags have deployed If you are involved in another Flashes hazard lights collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you e Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side o
311. ty responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you c
312. ual 4 Outside Air Intake 0 0 0 0 eae 245 Overheating Engine esaa aeua na eea N 306 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 387 Paint Care ep ax a RACE Ves 347 Panic Alarm 0 ee 24 Parking Brake ies enact ee bee ech ee a 259 Passing Light lt c b e pared hr Re 126 Personal Settings sius ew ne so DR XR RR d 181 l MED 69 Phone Cellular eee eee 81 Phone Hands Free UConnect 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 275 Power Door LOCKS eos once eas eem RA He deos 28 MuUrtOrs sa eii eniras genere Poo ei oS 79 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 144 SteBPIDEr ca deen Bieta ale Ah tle ee dena Sunroof usu bu eh aa Gea eae baa WindOwS i446 4 6 494 4 44 nae bade oN aec deme Power Steering Fluid liess Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 4020 INDEX ae Pretensioners Seat Belts si eaer nena e ra EE aa A 45 Programmable Electronic Features 181 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry llle 25 Radial Ply Tires ee teer dere ERR br 282 Radio Operation 29e e RE E es 238 Radio Satellite 0 0 cc cee ee eee 228 Rear Fog Lights secete Gadde e e e ms 357 Rear Liftgate Sedan 0004 34 Rear Seat Folding lt ecis esce ee t 119 Rear Window Defroster llus 153 Rear Window Features 0000000 152 Rear Wiper Washer isses 152 Recorder Event Data
313. uency kHz Bit Rate Kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 BoE 12 96 30 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scr
314. uese nes ed Ree aes 281 Inflation Pressures llle 280 Wife Of Tres enredar plv eX REA S 284 Load Capacity x esser RR wees as 275 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 287 Pressure Warning Light 171 Quality Grading 2 35 4 Rer es 389 Radial 4523 6 08 Glen od Seba eee ead 282 Replacement ovaieea di aca Gia ws eens tes 284 Rotati h sime 3 ERE DE RE ERIS 286 Safety ences deu tah ae kiept eren 270 279 SIZES zo ex eS PX UA EX ge x Es 272 SHOW Tires ness Areda a ERE GRO UR a 286 SPINNING crrr eee he ae rer e erra 282 Tread Wear Indicators 2 05 283 TOWING icu dykes a na Ve a ee PUER d ded 303 24 Hour Towing Assistance sess 96 Disabled Vehicle 0000000 320 Recreational i eere i we hw as EROR d 303 Towing Assistance o s sk ee me xem ong 96 Trailer LOWING osu dea uer a Res Rd ak San 303 Transaxle Automate Sie oo meo RAS dace a 12 Manitiall zuo sane eat beue Ed 14 252 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLinkB ie gm oa aia is eat ane A 134 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 0 0004 25 Transporting Pets 69 Tread Wear Indicators 0 05 283 Trip Odometer llle eee 167 10 406 INDEX EE Trip Odometer Reset Button 168 Turbo Cool Down esses 252 T rn Signals seg ee ems 124 170 357 UConnect Hands Free P
315. ultifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 81790d82 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the ignition is on the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off and the turn signals are off NOTE On this vehicle the DRLs will automatically turn off when the turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation and automatically turn back on when the turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are not operating 81c88b4e WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed Wiper Control 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU
316. ur seat belt snugly Continued ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfort
317. utside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device 815d5564 Power Sunroof
318. ve the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 WARNING e BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applie
319. vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE IEEE This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to kn
320. where temperatures may become too high 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Climate Control Location The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere The controls are as follows Mode Control Air Direction The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can sele
321. xceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your and number and size of occupants This table is for trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for manual to determine how this reduces the available the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle cargo and eben be Toad capacity of your venice e For the following example the combined weight of NOTE occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 392 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations 278 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 180 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
322. xhaust system E J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A
323. y Setup followed by Emergency e The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular
324. y dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended
325. ycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subseque
326. ystem will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 270 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 read wear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design design standards The size designation for LI Metric standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary
327. zed dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduc

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ST7 8-bit MCU family user guide  Conteúdo - Epson America, Inc.  CHEMORCLAD 9000  Manual de instalación, aluwall  WA100 ホイールアライメントシステム  Kärcher K 5.600 T 200  OPERaTOR`S MaNUaL  USER MANUAL    Bedienungsanleitung Meridian  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file